Owners manual

ManualsBrandsLG Electronics ManualsCell PhoneKU990

KU990

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﳌا ﻞﻴﻟد

CE 0168

www.lgmobile.com

P/N : MMBB0261335 (1.1) H P/N : MMBB0261335 (1.1) H

CE 0168

www.lgmobile.com

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

ENGLISH

KU990 KU990

ELECTRONICS INC.

ﻲﺑﺮﻋ

ENGLISH

Summary of content (194 pages)

PAGE 1
ENGLISH www.lgmobile.com KU990 P/N : MMBB0261335 (1.1) H ELECTRONICS INC. CE 0168 KU990 ‫دﻟﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ ENGLISH KU990 P/N : MMBB0261335 (1.1) H CE 0168 www.lgmobile.
PAGE 2
Bluetooth QD ID B013158
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ KU990‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ،LG‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤّﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪08‬‬
PAGE 6
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ‪8 .................................‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ‪9 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪10 ................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪12 ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪13 .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪14 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪15 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪16 .......................................
PAGE 7
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪34 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪34 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪34 .............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪35 ....................‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪36 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪36 ...............‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪37 ........
PAGE 8
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ‪56 ...................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪56 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪57 ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪57 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪57 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪57 ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪57 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ‪58 ..‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪58 ..............................
PAGE 9
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪72 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ LG PC Suite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪72 ......‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪72 ....................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ‪72 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪73 .........‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ‪73 .................................
PAGE 10
‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫)ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪/‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻬﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺮﻓﻀﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻓﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻳﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﻐﻨﻄﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻇﻔﺮﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪USIM‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻧﺤﻮ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.USIM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ّ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،USIM‬ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .
PAGE 14
‫ﺧ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ‪ KU990‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 2‬ﻏﻴﻐﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻚ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪Google‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪Muvee‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫”‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ‪ KU990‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎً ﺟﻴﺪﺍً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻬﺘﺰ ‪KU990‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﻚ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺼﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪18‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ GPRS‬ﻧﺸﻄﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻉ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎً ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ‪.C‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‘‪ ،’Home‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻜﻠﻢ ﻣﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻌﻴّﻦ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 23
‫ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ )ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ( ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻠﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻃﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺳﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺴﺢ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻰ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‘‪ ،’Home‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.E-H‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.23‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ -‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺭ ﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ .
PAGE 27
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻨﻚ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﻻﻕ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺎء‬ ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪) .‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ( ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻣﺞ ‪ KU990‬ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭ ﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪ T9‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪ ،Abc‬ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﻑ‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ T9‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ T9‬ﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ T9‬ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺳﺎً ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺎً ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ ،8‬ﻭ‪ ،3‬ﻭ‪ ،5‬ﻭ‪ ،3‬ﻭ‪ ،7‬ﻭ‪ ،4‬ﻭ‪ ،6‬ﻭ‪ ،6‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫‘‪.’telephone‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻫﺠﺎء‪ .
PAGE 30
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .KU990‬ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪ POP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪IMAP4‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺎً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻬﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﻻﻕ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺪ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ - SMTP‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪.SMTP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟـ ‪ - APOP‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟـ ‪ APOP‬ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ‪.POP3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ‪ IMAP4‬ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ “ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ” ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪:‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﻻﻕ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .
PAGE 33
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﻻﻕ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ -‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪ -‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺭ ﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ّ KU990‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .
PAGE 35
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ّ KU990‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﻻﻕ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ّ 1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺻﻮّﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻮّﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.36‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ -‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪ -‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‬ ‫ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺍً ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺾ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻏﻴّﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.40‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻘﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ‪ .ISO‬ﺩﻗﻖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺲ‬ ‫ﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻯ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ LG KU990‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،640x480‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﻀﻊ ٍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺫ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 44
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ّ 1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺻﻮّﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪ REC‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻼﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮّﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 120‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،Quad Speed Playback‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 120‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻓﻖ ‪ 15‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪﺍً ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪/‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﻖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪120‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 15‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ LG KU990‬ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬ ‫‪ 640X384‬ﻭ‪ .
PAGE 49
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ّ 1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ KU990‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‪ 320x240‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ 176x144‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ّ ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﻊ‬ ‫ﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ AVI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3GP‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪.GIF‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻹﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﺘﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﻴﺌﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ .
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﻭﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫‪ّ 4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ‪ّ -‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 55
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺎً ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﺎﺑﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﺪﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻟﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫‪ّ 3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﺎﻟﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺪﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺤﺺ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻨﺎء ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﻚ‬ ‫ﺢ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤّﺪ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ -‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛـ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌ ّﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺯ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ -‬ﻓﺮﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﻴّﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻏ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ SWF‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻛﺴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻮﺭﺑﻮﻳﻨﺖ ﻭﻭﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.pdf‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻮﺿﺎً ﻋﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎً ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﻼﺳﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﺟﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻳﺚ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ LG KU990‬ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻀﻤًّﻨﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺴ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ٍ‬ ‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ – ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﻞ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ّ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 12‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺛﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺛﻢ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪:‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣ ّﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﻋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﻼﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻴّﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻸﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﺃﻛﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﻜﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 74
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ LG PC Suite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ‪ LG PC Suite‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG‬ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ .
PAGE 76
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪ | LG KU990 74‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﻱ ﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﻱ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪DivX‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ ،DivX‬ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻣﻦ ‪ Program Files‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ DivX‬ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ‪.Converter‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ .Converter‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ .Mobile‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻘﺮﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،Preferences‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮّﻟﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﺎً ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ّ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻤﻮﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ KU990‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺇﺫ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪:USB‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ LG PC Suite‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ KU990‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪ US‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.LG PC Suite‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫ﻕ‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪79‬‬
PAGE 82
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪ KU990‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.22‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪ -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ -‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ KU990‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﻻﻕ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ KU990‬ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺙ‬ ‫ﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻒ‬ ‫ﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺫﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺤﺐ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺒ ّﺪﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ KU990‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 22‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ‪ BT‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪85‬‬
PAGE 88
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ‪.KU990‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪ KU990‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ‪.KU990‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺫﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ | LG KU990 86‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪01‬‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪87‬‬
PAGE 90
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪GSM‬‬ ‫‪،900‬ﻭ‪ ،DCS 1800‬ﻭ‪ PCS1900‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪.W-CDMA‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻲ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 91
PAGE 92
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﺮﺍً ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻦ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫• ﺣﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ّﺪﺩﺓ )‪ (SAR‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ‪Non-Ionizing Radiation‬‬ ‫)‪ ،Protection (ICNIRP‬ﻭﻫﻮ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﻎ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻏﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎً ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫• ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ SAR‬ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ِ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ DASY4‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻫﻲ ‪ 0.826‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﻎ )‪ 10‬ﻏﺮﺍﻡ(‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ّ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺫﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨّﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒّﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪.‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬ ‫ﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻰ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪02‬‬ ‫‪03‬‬ ‫‪04‬‬ ‫‪05‬‬ ‫‪06‬‬ ‫‪07‬‬ ‫‪08‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻚ ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 96
O
PAGE 97
MEMO
PAGE 98
MEMO
PAGE 99
Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
PAGE 100
Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact KU990 phone by LG, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology.
PAGE 101
G, Set up 01 Your standby screen 02 The basics 03 Get creative 04 Get organised 05 The web 06 Settings 07 Accessories 08
PAGE 102
Contents Set up Getting to know your phone ......................... 8 Open view .................................................. 9 Installing the USIM and battery................... 10 Memory card ............................................ 12 Menu map ................................................ 13 Your standby screen Touchscreen tips ....................................... 14 The quick keys.......................................... 15 The status bar ..........................................
PAGE 103
23 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 26 27 27 27 27 28 29 29 30 30 31 32 32 32 33 33 Your photos and videos ............................ 48 Viewing your photos and videos .............. 48 Camera .................................................. 34 Using zoom when viewing a video Taking a quick photo .............................. 34 or photo ................................................ 48 After you’ve taken your photo ................. 34 Adjusting the volume when viewing Getting to know the viewﬁnder.......
PAGE 104
Contents Creating a slide show............................. 56 Creating a playlist .................................. 63 Checking your memory status ................ 57 Editing a playlist .................................... 64 My sounds ............................................ 57 Deleting a playlist .................................. 64 Using a sound ....................................... 57 Video playlists ....................................... 64 My videos ..........................................
PAGE 105
63 64 64 64 64 65 65 65 66 66 66 67 68 68 68 69 69 69 70 70 70 71 71 PC Sync .................................................. 72 Installing LG PC Suite on your computer.. 72 Connecting your phone and PC............... 72 Backing up and restoring your phone’s information............................................ 72 Viewing your phone ﬁles on your PC ....... 73 Synchronising your contacts ................... 73 Synchronising your messages ................ 74 Using your phone as a mass storage device ...
PAGE 106
Getting to know your phone Charger, Cable, Handsfree connector TIP: To connect the USB cable, wait until the phone has powered up and has registered to the network. O Camera mode Lock/ Unlock key (Image Stabilization key in Camera) Inner camera lens End/Power key Ends or rejects a call. Turns the phone on/off. Press once to return to the standby screen. Clear key Deletes a character with each press. Call key Dials a phone number and answers incoming calls.
PAGE 107
de Jog wheel Zooms in or out when in camera or video mode. Scrolls through menus. TIP: You can adjust volume level when enjoying music, game and during a call. WARNING: Close contact with a magnetic object may cause a malfunction of the wheel key.
PAGE 108
Installing the USIM and battery 1 Remove the battery cover Press and hold down the battery release button at the top of the phone and lift off the battery cover. 2 Remove the battery Hold the top edge of the battery and lift the battery from the battery compartment by using the battery cover. In 3 WARNING: Do not use your ﬁngernail when removing the battery. WARNING: Do not remove the battery when the phone is switched on, as this may damage the phone.
PAGE 109
he Installing the USIM and battery 01 02 03 04 3 Install the USIM card Slide the USIM card into the USIM card holder. Make sure that the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards. To remove the USIM card, pull it gently in the reverse direction. 05 06 07 08 Set up 4 Install the battery Insert the top of the battery ﬁrst into the top edge of the battery compartment. Ensure the battery contacts align with the terminals on the phone. Press down the bottom of the battery until it clips into place.
PAGE 110
Memory card Installing a memory card Expand the memory space available on your phone using a memory card. The KU990 will support up to a 2GB memory card. TIP: Memory card is an optional accessory. 1 Remove the battery and battery cover as before. 2 Insert memory card. Slide the memory card into the slot at the top, until it clicks into place. Make sure that the gold contact area is facing downwards. M 1 From the standby screen select , then touch and choose Phone settings.
PAGE 111
Menu map 01 02 03 04 ur 05 06 Dialling Contacts My stuff Camera Browser Google Screen Proﬁles 07 08 Call logs Messaging e Muvee studio Music Video playlists Voice recorder FM radio Games & Apps Organiser Alarms Memos Tools Phone settings Call settings Flight mode Bluetooth K.
PAGE 112
Your standby screen Whenever your KU990 isn’t in use it’ll return to your home screen. From here you access all the menu options, make a quick call and view the status of your phone - as well as many other things. Status bar Multitasking Th ac Touchscreen tips The home screen is also a great place to get accustomed to the touch screen. To select an item touch the icon accurately. Your KU990 will vibrate slightly when it recognises you’ve touched an option.
PAGE 113
The quick keys 01 The quick keys provide easy, one-touch access to your most used functions. 02 Touch to open the full menu which is separated into four sub-menus. Touch each sub-menu’s vertical tab to view further options. Touch to access the Messaging options menu. From here you can create a new SMS or email, or view your message folder. See page 26 for details. Touch to bring up the touch dialling pad to make a call. Input the number as you would using a normal key pad and touch or press the .
PAGE 114
Your standby screen The status bar Ch sta To pro ap tou The status bar indicates, using various icons, things like signal strength, new messages and battery life as well as telling you whether your Bluetooth or GPRS is active. Below is a table which explains the meaning of icons you’re likely to see in the status bar.
PAGE 115
Changing your proﬁle from the status bar Touch the icon that represents your current proﬁle setting in the status bar. Select a proﬁle type, for example Silent, and touch OK to save and close. Using the Multitasking function Touch to open the Multitasking menu. From here you can view all the applications you have running and access them with one touch. From any application, touch and select Home screen to return to the standby screen without exiting or closing the application.
PAGE 116
Calls Making a call or video call Making a call from your contacts to open the keypad. 1 Touch 2 Key in the number using the keypad. 1 From the standby screen touch To delete a digit press the C hard key. 3 Touch or hard key to initiate the call. Touch to make a video call. 4 To end the call press the hard key. 2 Select the alphabetical tab corresponding TIP! To enter + for making an international twice.
PAGE 117
In-call options Mute - Touch to turn off the microphone so the person you are talking to cannot hear you. g Speaker - Touch speaker phone. e u Hold - Touch to put a caller on hold. Touch Resume to continue your conversation. to open a numerical Keypad - Touch keypad for navigating menus with numbered options. For example when dialling call centres or other automated telephone services.
PAGE 118
Calls Speed dialling You can assign a frequently-called contact to a speed dial number. 1 Touch and select Contacts. 2 Touch Speed dials. 3 Your Voicemail is already set to speed dial 1. You cannot change this. Touch any other number to assign it a speed dial contact. 4 Your address book will open. Select the contact you’d like to assign to that number by touching their phone number once.
PAGE 119
ds es. Missed calls - View the list of all the calls you have missed. Call charges - View the charges applied to your dialled numbers (this service is network dependant, some operators are unable to support this) and the call duration of all your calls; received and dialled. Data volume - View the amount in kilobytes of all your received and sent data. TIP! From any call log touch delete all the recorded items.
PAGE 120
Calls C Changing the common call setting Changing your video call setting Se 1 Touch 1 Touch Th , select and choose Call setting. 2 Touch Common setting. From here you can amend the settings for: Call reject - Select On or Off and choose to reject all calls, of those from speciﬁc groups, contacts or from unregistered numbers (those not in your contacts). Send my number - Choose whether your number will be displayed when you call someone. Auto redial - Choose On or Off.
PAGE 121
ge Contacts Searching for a contact TIP! To scroll through your list of contacts, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. There are two ways to search for a contact: From the standby screen 1 From the standby screen touch to open the address book. 2 Select the alphabetical tab corresponding to the ﬁrst letter of the contact you’d like to view. So, for ‘Home’ select E-H.
PAGE 122
Contacts Contact options Add new contact - You can add new entry. Mark/Unmark - You can select one or more contacts for multiple deletion. Search by group - You can search the entry by group. There are many things you can do when viewing a contact. Here’s how to access and use the options menu: 1 Open the contact you’d like to use. See The basics Searching for a contact on page 23. 2 Press to open the list of options. From here you can: Edit - Change any of the contact’s details.
PAGE 123
be Changing your contact settings You can adapt your contact settings so that your address book works in the way you prefer. TIP! To scroll through a list of options, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. 1 From the standby screen touch 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Viewing information 1 From the standby screen touch and select Contacts. 2 Select Infomation.
PAGE 124
Messaging Messaging Entering text T9 Your KU990 combines SMS, MMS and email into one intuitive and easy to use menu. There are four ways to enter text: T9 predictive, Abc manual, Keyboard and Handwriting recognition. In There are two ways to enter the messaging centre: 1 Touch from the standby screen. 2 Touch from the standby screen, then Messaging. Sending a message 1 Touch 2 3 4 5 then choose Create new message. Choose Message to send an SMS or MMS. Or to send an email, choose Email.
PAGE 125
h x 23 T9 predictive In T9 mode you will see Keyboard . T9 mode uses a built-in dictionary to recognise words you’re writing based on the key sequences you touch. Simply touch the number key associated with the letter you want to enter, and the dictionary will recognise the word once all the letters are entered. For example, press 8, 3, 5, 3, 7, 4, 6, 6, 3 to write ‘telephone’. If the word you want doesn’t appear, touch or Spell.
PAGE 126
Messaging Setting up your email You can stay in touch on the move using email on your KU990. It’s quick and simple to set up a POP3 or IMAP4 email account. TIP! To scroll through a list of option, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. 1 2 3 4 The basics Touch then select Settings. Touch Email then Email accounts. Open and touch Add new. You can now choose how your account works: Title - Enter a name for this account.
PAGE 127
4 h APOP secure login - Choose to activate APOP secure login for a POP3 account. IMAP4 accounts are always set to off. Now your account is set up, it will appear in the list of accounts in your Email folder. Retrieving your email You can automatically or manually check your account for new email. See ‘Change your email settings’ to check automatically. To check manually: 1 Touch then Email.
PAGE 128
Messaging Changing your email settings You can adapt your email settings so that it works in the way you prefer. TIP! To scroll through a list of option, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. 1 Touch then open Settings. 2 Touch Email and then you can adapt the The basics following settings: Email accounts - Create or conﬁgure an email account including the email server and user name.
PAGE 129
Managing your messages nd ur You can use your Inbox to manage your messages. TIP! To scroll through a list of option, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. 1 Touch 2 Touch ls. ve 01 If you see the message No space for USIM message you should delete some messages from your inbox. 02 If you see the message No space for messages you can delete either messages or saved ﬁles to create space.
PAGE 130
Messaging Using templates Changing your text message settings Create templates for the SMS and MMS messages you send most frequently. You’ll ﬁnd some templates already on your phone, you can edit these if you wish. Your KU990 message settings are pre-deﬁned so that you can send messages immediately. If you’d like to change the settings, see below for more information. 1 Touch then choose Templates.
PAGE 131
gs ed y. w d. ze s. Changing your multimedia message settings Your KU990 message settings are pre-deﬁned so that you can send messages immediately. If you’d like to change the settings, see below for more information. TIP! To scroll through a list of option, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. Touch then choose Settings then Multimedia message.
PAGE 132
Camera Taking a quick photo After you’ve taken your photo 1 Move the camera mode switch to . 2 Press the capture button. The camera’s Your captured photo will appear on screen. The name of the image runs along the bottom of the screen together with four icons down the right side. viewﬁnder will appear on screen. 3 Holding the phone horizontally, point 4 5 6 7 the lens towards the subject of the photo. Slightly press the capture button, a focus box will appear in the centre of the viewﬁnder screen.
PAGE 133
Getting to know the viewﬁnder om Zoom - Touch to zoom in or to zoom out. Alternatively you can use the jog wheel around the lens. 01 Settings - Touch this icon to open the settings menu. See Using the advanced settings on page 39 for details. 03 Camera mode - Camera mode is selected. 02 04 05 Flash status Macro on/off y. 06 Flash - See Using the ﬂash on page 36. 07 Quick settings 08 Contrast - See Adjusting the contrast on page 37. Shot type - See Choosing a shot type on page 37.
PAGE 134
Camera Using the ﬂash The ﬂash is set to Auto as default, but there are other options. 1 Select from the top right corner of the viewﬁnder to enter the ﬂash sub-menu. 2 There are three ﬂash options: Get creative Auto - Your camera will assess the lighting needed to take a good picture and use the ﬂash as necessary. Red-eye reduction - The camera will ﬂash twice in order to reduce red eye. Always off - The camera will never ﬂash. This is useful if you want to save battery power.
PAGE 135
ge r t Adjusting the contrast Contrast deﬁnes the difference between light and dark in an image. A low contrast image will appear foggy, whereas a high contrast image will appear much sharper. 1 Touch . 2 Slide the contrast indicator along the bar, towards for a lower contrast, hazier image or towards for a higher contrast, sharper image. Frame - Choose from one of the fun frames to transform your friend into a pirate or just decorate their surroundings.
PAGE 136
Camera Using continuous shot mode Taking a panoramic shot Us Continuous shot mode is great for taking photos of moving objects or at sporting events. Capture life as it appears using panoramic shot. The camera will let you take three photo’s, all aligned, and combine them into one image so that your wide angle view becomes a panoramic photo. Fro the 1 Touch 2 3 4 5 to open the available shot types and select Continuous.
PAGE 137
to, ly. Using the advanced settings From the viewﬁnder touch to open all the advanced settings options. ISO - ISO determines the sensitivity of the camera’s light sensor. The higher the ISO, the more sensitive the camera will be. This is useful in darker conditions when the ﬂash can’t be used. Choose an ISO value from Auto, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400 or ISO 800. Colour tone - Choose a colour tone to apply to the photo you’re taking. See Choosing a colour tone on page 40.
PAGE 138
Camera Note: Always touch Save after selecting a new setting to implement the changes you’ve made. TIP! When you exit the camera all your settings will return to default, except image size and image quality. Any non-default settings you require will need to be reset, for example colour tone and ISO. Check them before you shoot your next photo.
PAGE 139
al nd e, Using the inner camera 02 1 To switch to the inner camera touch then select 03 . 2 After a few seconds you’ll see yourself in the viewﬁnder. To capture the image press the capture button as normal. TIP! The inner camera has fewer settings as it has no ﬂash or ISO. You can still alter the image size, image quality, white balance and colour in the same way as when tone by touching using the main camera.
PAGE 140
Video camera Shooting a quick video 1 Move the camera mode switch to 2 Press the capture button. The video After you’ve shot your video . camera’s viewﬁnder will appear on screen. 3 Holding the phone horizontally, point the Ge A still image representing your captured video will appear on screen. The name of the image runs along the bottom of the screen together with three icons down the right side. lens towards the subject of the video. 4 Press the capture button once to start recording.
PAGE 141
Getting to know the viewﬁnder 01 eo ge er Zoom - Touch to zoom in or to zoom out. Alternatively you can use the jog wheel around the lens. 02 03 Video mode - Video mode is selected. Image size 04 Saving to handset memory/ External memory 05 120fps - Smaller image size with Quad Speed Playback, capturing the action at an impressive 120 frames per second. Playback is at 15 frames per second for the best view in the house. Great for capturing high speed action.
PAGE 142
Video camera Adjusting the contrast Contrast deﬁnes the difference between light and dark in an image. A low contrast image will appear foggy, whereas a high contrast image will appear much sharper. 1 Touch . 2 Slide the contrast indicator along the bar, towards for a lower contrast, hazier image, or towards for a higher contrast, sharper image. Using the advanced settings From the viewﬁnder touch advanced settings options. to open all the Image quality - Choose between Super ﬁne, Fine and Normal.
PAGE 143
e le Switch camera - Switch to your LG KU990’s inner camera to record a video of yourself. See Using the inner video camera on page 46 for details. Memory in use - Choose whether to save your videos to the Handset memory or to the External memory. Note: Always touch Save after selecting a new setting to implement the changes you’ve made. TIP! When you exit the video camera all your settings will return to default, except image size and image quality.
PAGE 144
Video camera 4 Select the size option you’d like to use and touch Save to implement your changes. The settings menu will automatically close, ready for you to shoot your video. Note: When you view your videos, playback speed is 30 frames per second, with the exception of 120 fps where playback is at 15 frames per second.. WARNING: The great editing software on your LG KU990 is compatible with all video types except 640X384 and 640x480. Don’t record in this format if you plan to edit your video.
PAGE 145
r Watching your saved videos Watching your videos on your TV 1 Move the camera mode switch to Connect your KU990 to your TV using the TV output cable. Open the video you’d like to watch on TV, press and select . 01 Note: The TV output cable is available for purchase separately. 03 and press the capture button. 2 Your gallery will appear on screen. ra, ge s ed a WARNING: All formats except 320x240 and 176x144 are compatible with watching on TV.
PAGE 146
Your photos and videos Viewing your photos and videos 1 From the standby screen, move the Using zoom when viewing a video or photo camera mode switch to and press the capture button. 2 Your gallery will appear on screen. To zoom in press repeatedly. To zoom out press . Use the thumbnail in the bottom right corner to move the focus area.
PAGE 147
ut ng o e ch Viewing the details of a video or photo Videos and photos are grouped together in the gallery. If you have trouble telling which are photos and which are videos, check the details. For example, videos may be AVI or 3GP ﬁle types and photos may be JPEG or GIF ﬁle types. 1 Touch the video still or photo to bring it to the front of the gallery screen. icon in the bottom right corner of the video still or photo.
PAGE 148
Your photos and videos Viewing your photos as a slide show Slideshow mode will show all the photos in your gallery one at a time as a slideshow. Videos can not be viewed as a slideshow. 1 Touch the photo you would like to begin the slideshow twice to open it. 2 Touch the right side of the screen to open the options menu. 3 Select . 4 The slideshow will begin. / Touch to pause the slideshow on a particular photo. Touch again to resume playback.
PAGE 149
n Editing your photos 1 Open the photo you’d like to edit and Decorate your photo with stamps. Choose from the different stamps available and touch your photo wherever you’d like them to be. To change the colour of a stamp see below. touch to bring up the options. 2 Select . The following screen will be displayed. Change the colour of a stamp, line or some text. You must select the colour before you draw, write or stamp the photo.
PAGE 150
Your photos and videos Adding text to a photo 1 From the editing screen, touch . 2 Select Signature to add unframed text or choose either of the speech bubble shapes. 3 Enter your text using the keypad and touch Done. 4 Move the text by touching it and sliding it to the place you’d like it to be. Adding an effect to a photo 1 From the editing screen, touch . 2 Choose to apply any of the six options to the photo: Soften - Move the marker along the bar to soften the focus of the photo.
PAGE 151
ze Morphing a photo 3 Select part of the photo. A traced line will Morphing a photo is great for changing the facial expressions of friends, or just for distorting a photo for artistic effect. 1 From the editing screen touch . 2 Choose Morphing and four crosses will 4 5 appear on the photo. 3 Move the crosses around the photo so they are on the part you’d like to morph. For example, if you are morphing a face, place a cross on the outside corner of each eye and one each side of the lips.
PAGE 152
Multimedia You can store any multimedia ﬁles into your phone’s memory so that you have easy access to all of your pictures, sounds, videos and games. You can also save your ﬁles to a memory card. The advantage of using a memory card is that you can free up space on your phone’s memory. To access the Multimedia menu, touch then . Touch My stuff to open a list of folders storing all of your multimedia ﬁles.
PAGE 153
. photo will be attached to the message and you can write and send the message as normal. If you choose Bluetooth, you will be prompted to turn Bluetooth on and your phone will search for a device to send the picture to. Organising your images 1 2 3 4 Touch then . Touch My stuff then My images. Touch then Sort by. Choose from Date, Type or Name. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Note: As well as sorting your images by category, you can also manually sort them by using the Move option.
PAGE 154
Multimedia Moving or copying an image Creating a slide show Ch You can move or copy an image between the phone memory and the memory card. You might want to do this to either free up some space in one of the memory banks or to safeguard your images from being lost. If you want to look at all of the images on your phone or scan through what you’ve got, you can create a slide show to save you from having to open and close each individual image. Yo me mu 1 2 3 4 Touch then .
PAGE 155
Checking your memory status My videos You can check to see how much of your memory space you have used and how much you have left to use. The My videos folder shows the list of downloaded videos and videos you have recorded on your phone. 1 Touch then . 2 Touch My stuff then My images. Watching a video 3 Touch then Memory manager. 4 Choose Handset memory or External memory. 1 Touch then . 2 Touch My stuff then My videos. 3 Select a video and touch Play.
PAGE 156
Multimedia Using options while video is paused Touch while in pause mode and choose from: Capture - Capture the frozen frame as a picture. File info. - View the Name, Size, Date, Time, Type, Duration, Dimension, Protection and Copyright details. Send - Send the video in a Message, Email, Bluetooth and Youtube. Delete - Delete the video. Use as - Use the video as a ringtone. Video editor - Edit the video clip.
PAGE 157
e e d nd e Copy - Copy a video clip from the phone memory to a memory card or vice versa. Delete - Delete a video. Rename - Rename a video. Mark/Unmark - Select multiple ﬁles. Create new folder - Create a new folder within the My videos folder. Sort by - Sort videos into a speciﬁc order. Memory manager - View the memory status. Playing a game 1 Touch then . 2 Touch My stuff then My games & apps. 3 Select a game and touch Launch.
PAGE 158
Multimedia Flash contents Transferring a ﬁle to your phone Ot The Flash contents folder contains all of your default and downloaded SWF ﬁles. Viewing an SWF ﬁle Bluetooth is probably the easiest way to transfer a ﬁle from your computer to your phone. You can also use LG PC Suite via your sync cable, see page 72 for details. 1 Touch To transfer using Bluetooth: Th are ap Do yo ph rat ha then . 2 Touch My stuff then Flash contents. 3 Select the ﬁle and touch View.
PAGE 159
ve ts Others Muvee studio The Others folder is used to store ﬁles which are not pictures, sounds, videos, games or applications. It is used in the same way as the Documents folder. You may ﬁnd that when you transfer ﬁles from your computer to your phone that they appear in the Others folder rather than the Documents folder. If this happens you can move them. The Muvee studio allows you to create an image slide show combined with music.
PAGE 160
Multimedia Creating a movie 1 Touch then . 2 Touch Muvee studio. 3 Touch to add an image. Touch the images you want to include then select Done. 4 Touch to choose a Muvee style. Select from: classsic forever Moody moden musical 5 Touch Play to see what you’ve created. 6 Touch then Save Location to choose where to save the movie. Music Your LG KU990 has built-in music player so you can play all your favourite tracks. To access the music player, touch then then Music.
PAGE 161
ne Playing a song Creating a playlist 1 Touch then . 2 Touch Music, then All tracks. 3 Select the song you want to play and You can create your own playlists by choosing a selection of songs from the All tracks folder. 01 1 Touch then . 2 Touch Music, then Playlists. 03 4 5 6 7 touch Play. Touch to pause the song. Touch to skip to the next song. Touch to skip to the previous song. Touch to stop the music and return to the Music menu. TIP! To change the volume while listening to music, touch .
PAGE 162
Multimedia To play a playlist, select it and touch Play. Deleting a playlist Note: To add a second playlist, touch then Add new playlist. 1 Touch then . 2 Touch Music, then Playlists. 3 Touch then Delete or Delete Editing a playlist From time to time, you may want to add new songs or delete songs from a playlist. When you want to do this, you can edit the playlist. 1 2 3 4 Touch then . Touch Music, then Playlists. Select the playlist. Touch and select: Add new songs – To add more songs to the playlist.
PAGE 163
2 Touch Voice recorder then and choose from: Duration – Set the recording duration. Choose from MMS message size, 1 minute or No limit. Quality – Select the sound quality. Choose from Super Fine, Fine or Normal. Go to my sounds – Open the Voice recordings folder in My sounds. Recording a sound or voice 1 2 3 4 5 Touch then . Touch Voice recorder. Touch to begin recording. Touch to end recording. Touch to listen to your recording. Sending the voice recording 1 Once you have ﬁnished recording, touch .
PAGE 164
Multimedia Searching for stations Editing the channels Li You can tune radio stations into your phone by searching for them either manually or automatically. They will then be saved to speciﬁc channel numbers so you don’t have to keep re-tuning. You can save up to 12 channels in your phone. You may want to move the stations to another channel so that the ones you listen to most frequently are easier to access. 1 2 To auto tune: 1 Touch then . 2 Touch FM radio then . 3 Touch Auto scan then Yes.
PAGE 165
Listening to the radio er 1 Touch then . 2 Touch FM radio then touch the channel number of the station you would like to listen to. TIP! To improve the radio reception, extend the headset cord, which functions as the radio antenna.
PAGE 166
Organiser Adding an event to your calendar 1 From the standby screen select 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 , then touch and choose Organiser. Select Calendar. Select the date you would like to add an event to. Touch then Add new event. Select whether you would like to add an Appointment, Anniversary or Birthday and touch OK. Check the date and enter time you would like your event to begin. For appointments and anniversaries enter the time and date your event ﬁnishes in the lower two time and date boxes.
PAGE 167
Adding an item to your to do list Using date ﬁnder 1 From the standby screen select Date ﬁnder is a handy tool to help you calculate what the date will be after a certain amount of days has passed. For example, 60 days from 10.10.07 will be 09.12.2007. This is great for keeping tabs on deadlines. , then touch and choose Organiser. 2 Select To do and touch Add. 3 Set the date for the to do item, add notes and select a priority level: High, Medium or Low. 4 Save your to do list item by selecting Save.
PAGE 168
Organiser Setting your alarm 1 From the standby screen select 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Adding a memo , then and choose Alarms. Select and touch Add new. Set the time you would like the alarm to sound and touch Set. Choose whether you would like your alarm to sound Once, Daily, Mon - Fri, Mon - Sat or Sat - Sun. Press OK. Select to select a sound for your alarm. To listen to sounds touch the sound, followed by Play. After you have made your selection, touch Select. Add a memo for the alarm.
PAGE 169
me Adding a city to your world clock Converting a unit 1 From the standby screen select 1 From the standby screen select , then touch and choose Tools. 2 Select World clock. 3 Touch the icon, followed by Add city. Start typing the name of the city you require and it will show at the top of the screen. Alternately touch Map, and select your chosen city from the map. 4 Touch Select to conﬁrm your choice.
PAGE 170
PC Sync You can synchronise your PC with your phone to make sure all your important details and dates match, but also as a backup to put your mind at ease. Installing LG PC Suite on your computer 1 From the standby screen select 2 3 4 5 6 7 , then and choose Phone settings. touch Select Connectivity, then USB connection mode. Select Data Service and touch OK. Insert the supplied CD into your PC. LG PC Suite Installer will appear on your screen. Click on LG PC Suite Installer.
PAGE 171
. sh. k uld Viewing your phone ﬁles on your PC Synchronising your contacts 1 Connect your phone to your PC as 1 Connect your phone to your PC. 2 Click on the Contacts icon. 3 Select Transfer, then Import from 01 mobile handset. Your PC will now import and display all contacts saved to your USIM card and handset. 4 Click on File and select Save. You can now select where you would like to save your contacts to. 03 outlined above. 2 Click on the Contents icon.
PAGE 172
PC Sync Synchronising your messages 1 Connect your phone to your PC. 2 Click on the Messages icon. 3 All of your PC and phone messages will be displayed in folders on your screen. 4 Use the tool bar at the top of your screen to edit and rearrange messages. Using your phone as a mass storage device You phone can only be used as a mass storage device if you have a memory card inserted. 1 Disconnect your phone from your PC. 2 From the standby screen select 3 4 5 6 , then touch and choose Phone settings.
PAGE 173
n d t DivX Converter Install the DivX converter which is supplied on the same CD as the PC Sync software. Once installed select DivX from the Program Files on your PC, then DivX converter followed by Converter. This will open the Converter application. Use the arrows in the application to change the conversion format to Mobile. If you do a right click on the application box and select Preferences, you can change the location of where the converted ﬁles are saved.
PAGE 174
The web With browser at the tip of your ﬁngers, you can get the up to date news and weather forecast as well as information on sports or trafﬁc whenever you need it. In addition, browser allows you to download the latest music, ringtones, wallpapers and games. Accessing the web 1 From the standby screen select , then touch and choose Browser. 2 To access the browser homepage directly, select Home. Alternately select Enter address and type in your desired URL, followed by Connect.
PAGE 175
Saving a page Viewing your browser history 1 Access your required webpage as 1 From the standby screen select described above. 2 Touch and select Save this page. 3 Enter a name for the webpage so you can easily recognise it. 4 Touch Save. TIP! This menu will also allow you to edit titles of saved pages, protect or unprotect the screen memo, and delete saved pages. Accessing a saved page 1 From the standby screen select , then touch and choose Browser. 2 Select Saved pages.
PAGE 176
The web Using your phone as a modem Your KU990 can double as a modem for your PC, giving you email and internet access even when you can’t connect using wires. You can use either the USB cable or Bluetooth. Using the USB cable: 1 Ensure you have the LG PC Suite installed on your PC. 2 Connect your KU990 and your PC using the USB cable and launch the LG PC Suite software. 3 Click Communication on your PC. Then click Settings and select Modem. 4 Choose LG Mobile USB Modem and select OK.
PAGE 177
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 The web 79
PAGE 178
Settings Within this folder you can adapt your settings to make your KU990 personal to you. Note: For information on call settings see page 22. Changing your screen settings 1 Touch then choose . 2 Touch Screen settings and then choose from: Main screen theme - Choose the theme for your standby screen or outgoing call. Clock and Calendar - Choose what is visible on your standby screen. Brightness - Adjust the screen’s brightness. Backlight - Choose how long the backlight remains on for.
PAGE 179
e ﬁle nt nd g Changing your phone settings Enjoy the freedom of adapting your KU990 works so that it works in a way which suits you best. TIP! To scroll through a list of option, touch the last item visible and slide your ﬁnger up the screen. The list will move up so more items are visible. 1 Touch then choose .
PAGE 180
Settings Using memory manager Using ﬂight mode To Your KU990 has three memories available: the phone, the USIM Card and an external memory card (you may need to purchase the memory card separately). Turn on ﬂight mode by selecting , then . Touch Flight mode and select On. Flight mode will not allow you to make calls, connect to the Internet, send messages or use Bluetooth. 1 You can use memory manager to determine how each memory is used and see how much space is available. followed by .
PAGE 181
n. e n s. To receive a ﬁle: 1 To receive ﬁles your Bluetooth must be both On and Visible. See change your Bluetooth settings below for more information. 2 A message will prompt you to accept the ﬁle from the sender. Touch Yes to receive the ﬁle. 3 You will see where the ﬁle has been saved and you can choose to View the ﬁle or Use as wallpaper. Files will usually be saved to the relevant folder in My Stuff. Changing your bluebooth settings: 1 Touch and choose Settings. 2 Choose Bluetooth then Settings.
PAGE 182
Settings Using a Bluetooth headset 1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible. 2 Follow the instructions that came with your headset to place your headset in pairing mode and pair your devices. 3 Touch Yes to Connect now. Your KU990 will automatically switch to Headset proﬁle. TIP! See page 22 for details on BT answer mode so that you can control how you answer calls when your Bluetooth headset is connected.
PAGE 183
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Settings 85
PAGE 184
Accessories These accessories were supplied with KU990. Charger Data cable and CD Connect and synchronise your KU990 and PC. Battery User Guide Learn more about your KU990. Stylus and carry strap Stereo headset Accessories 86 LG KU990 | User Guide Note • Always use genuine LG accessories. • Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty. • Accessories may be different in different regions; please check with our regional service company or agent for further inquires.
PAGE 185
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 .
PAGE 186
Network service Technical data The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 900, DCS 1800, PCS1900 and W-CDMA network. General A number of features included in this guide are called Network Services. These are special services that you arrange through your wireless service provider. Before you can take advantage of any of these Network Services, you must subscribe to them through your service provider and obtain instructions for their use from your service provider.
PAGE 187
g)
PAGE 188
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient Use G Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this manual. • • Emergency calls may not be available • WARNING • Mobile Phones must be switched off at all • times in an aircraft. • Do not hold the phone in your hand while driving. • Do not use your phone near petrol stations, fuel depots, chemical plants or blasting operations.
PAGE 189
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient Use • While there may be differences between u gy on his s of Product care and maintenance WARNING! Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a • • • • • • • • • • • qualiﬁed service technician when repair work is required.
PAGE 190
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient Use G Efﬁcient phone operation Ch Electronics devices All mobile phones may get interference, which could affect performance. • Do not use your mobile phone near medical equipment without requesting permission. Avoid placing the phone over pacemakers, i.e. in your breast pocket. • Some hearing aids might be disturbed by mobile phones. • Minor interference may affect TVs, radios, PCs, etc.
PAGE 191
Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient Use Children Keep the phone in a safe place out of small children’s reach. It includes small parts which if detached may cause a choking hazard. Emergency calls y . Emergency calls may not be available under all mobile networks. Therefore, you should never depend solely on the phone for emergency calls. Check with your local service provider. • Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximize usability.
PAGE 192
M
PAGE 193
MEMO
PAGE 194
MEMO